Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib...

32
HR Administrative Process Team Page 1 of 32 19 January 2010 UCL HUMAN RESOURCES DIVISION Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter

Transcript of Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib...

Page 1: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

HR Administrative Process Team Page 1 of 32 19 January 2010

UCL HUMAN RESOURCES DIVISION

Online Recruitment SystemQuick Guide to the System

Recruiter

Helen Brown Page 2 of 32 11 January 2010

CONTENTS

Navigation 3Requesting Access to the System 3Log On Screen3Navigating the Homepage 4

Creating a Vacancy6lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo6lsquoNew Templatersquo 6Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details6Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens7Step 7 Application Form 8Step 8 Access8Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy 9Editing a Vacancy - Amendments10Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission 10Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources 11

Vacancy Workflow 12

Creating Interviews13Creating the Interview Slots 14Edit Amend Interview Schedules 15

Add Candidate 16

Print Applications Print Book 18

Shortlisting19ScoresFeedback19Screening Criteria Update 20Panel Agreed sift rating Update20

Moving Applicant Statuses 20

Status Workflow 22

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews 24Viewing Interview Schedules 26Printing off Interview Schedules 26

References (and Sub Statuses)27Sub Statuses 28

Statistics Reports 29Reports Navigation 29Accessing a Presaved Report 30Creating a New Report 30Editing a Report 31

Helen Brown Page 3 of 32 11 January 2010

Navigation

Requesting Access to the System

In order to access the ROME system a user registration form must be completed signedoff by the requestorrsquos Head of Departments or nominee and returned to the HRInformation Office The form can be accessed from wwwuclacukhrrome

There are various levels of access to the ROME system as follows

Recruiter Chair Interviewer

Log On Screen

1 Access to the system is via single sign on Start your Internet browser and enter thefollowing URL httpsstaticwcncoukcompanyuclsingle_sign_onhtml

Figure 10 System log in

2 Enter your username and password (both are case sensitive)

If you enter your username and password combination incorrectly three times insuccession you will be locked out of your account for security reasons

Please contact the HR Helpdesk on 020 7679 9775 (extension 09775) or you can raise acall by logging your query on HR Systems Helpdesk Webform which will authenticate youusing your UCL username and password and allow you to enter the details of the issueusing pre-defined categories and free text

Navigating the HomepageThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features Thesesecurity features also prevent system users from using the Internet browser tool bar at thetop of the page If users try and use the refresh back and forward buttons they may belogged out of the system and have to log back in with potential loss of data Users aretherefore instructed to use the various menus tool bars and icons contained within thesystem to navigate through the system only

There are features on the home page of the system that assist with navigation These aredetailed below

2 3 45 6

7

8

1

Helen Brown Page 4 of 32

Figure 11 System homepage

1 The Home ButtonThe home button can be clicked on at any point whilst usingautomatically be returned to the system home page

2 Recently Viewed CandidatesWhen this button is clicked a drop down of recently viewedscreen

3 Quick SearchThe Quick Search provides a way of searching the system fo

1

0

11 January 2010

the system and you will

candidates will populate the

r candidates by their name

9

Helen Brown Page 5 of 32 11 January 2010

4 Quick Status SearchWhen the box is clicked into a drop down list of the applicant statusrsquo will appear Selectthe status on which the search is to be conducted and the search will commence

5 Switch to Saved Search CriteriaThis allows previously saved searches to be chosen

6 Click and Type to Search VacanciesThis allows the lsquoSummary of Active Candidatesrsquo to be refinedClick in the box and a drop down list of the vacancies that the user has access to willappear Select the vacancy for which the summary is required and click on the blue arrow( ) to execute the query The details of the candidates at particular statusrsquo willupdate to show the summary for the vacancy chosen

7 Summary of Active CandidatesThe summary of active candidates when first opened will display candidates for allvacancies that the user has access to broken down by the statusrsquo of the candidate Oncea particular vacancy has been chosen (point 6 above) this will update to show thecandidates per status for the selected vacancy

8 System MenuThis menu provides access to various functionality within the system including

Candidates Vacancies Interviews References Statistics

A breakdown as to the functionality and sub menus within these categories is explainedthroughout the manual

9 Applications GraphThis provide a visual breakdown (Figure 11) of the volume of applications received Whenfirst visible this will show all candidates for the vacancies that the user has access toOnce a particular vacancy has been selected (point 6 above) this will change to show thenumber of applications for a particular vacancy

10 Summary of Interviews PendingThis will show a summary of the interviews that the user has been given access to Thecalendar can be broken down as intervals between 1 week and 1 year by clicking on thedrop down list in the top left hand corner and clicking on lsquogorsquo

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 2: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 2 of 32 11 January 2010

CONTENTS

Navigation 3Requesting Access to the System 3Log On Screen3Navigating the Homepage 4

Creating a Vacancy6lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo6lsquoNew Templatersquo 6Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details6Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens7Step 7 Application Form 8Step 8 Access8Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy 9Editing a Vacancy - Amendments10Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission 10Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources 11

Vacancy Workflow 12

Creating Interviews13Creating the Interview Slots 14Edit Amend Interview Schedules 15

Add Candidate 16

Print Applications Print Book 18

Shortlisting19ScoresFeedback19Screening Criteria Update 20Panel Agreed sift rating Update20

Moving Applicant Statuses 20

Status Workflow 22

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews 24Viewing Interview Schedules 26Printing off Interview Schedules 26

References (and Sub Statuses)27Sub Statuses 28

Statistics Reports 29Reports Navigation 29Accessing a Presaved Report 30Creating a New Report 30Editing a Report 31

Helen Brown Page 3 of 32 11 January 2010

Navigation

Requesting Access to the System

In order to access the ROME system a user registration form must be completed signedoff by the requestorrsquos Head of Departments or nominee and returned to the HRInformation Office The form can be accessed from wwwuclacukhrrome

There are various levels of access to the ROME system as follows

Recruiter Chair Interviewer

Log On Screen

1 Access to the system is via single sign on Start your Internet browser and enter thefollowing URL httpsstaticwcncoukcompanyuclsingle_sign_onhtml

Figure 10 System log in

2 Enter your username and password (both are case sensitive)

If you enter your username and password combination incorrectly three times insuccession you will be locked out of your account for security reasons

Please contact the HR Helpdesk on 020 7679 9775 (extension 09775) or you can raise acall by logging your query on HR Systems Helpdesk Webform which will authenticate youusing your UCL username and password and allow you to enter the details of the issueusing pre-defined categories and free text

Navigating the HomepageThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features Thesesecurity features also prevent system users from using the Internet browser tool bar at thetop of the page If users try and use the refresh back and forward buttons they may belogged out of the system and have to log back in with potential loss of data Users aretherefore instructed to use the various menus tool bars and icons contained within thesystem to navigate through the system only

There are features on the home page of the system that assist with navigation These aredetailed below

2 3 45 6

7

8

1

Helen Brown Page 4 of 32

Figure 11 System homepage

1 The Home ButtonThe home button can be clicked on at any point whilst usingautomatically be returned to the system home page

2 Recently Viewed CandidatesWhen this button is clicked a drop down of recently viewedscreen

3 Quick SearchThe Quick Search provides a way of searching the system fo

1

0

11 January 2010

the system and you will

candidates will populate the

r candidates by their name

9

Helen Brown Page 5 of 32 11 January 2010

4 Quick Status SearchWhen the box is clicked into a drop down list of the applicant statusrsquo will appear Selectthe status on which the search is to be conducted and the search will commence

5 Switch to Saved Search CriteriaThis allows previously saved searches to be chosen

6 Click and Type to Search VacanciesThis allows the lsquoSummary of Active Candidatesrsquo to be refinedClick in the box and a drop down list of the vacancies that the user has access to willappear Select the vacancy for which the summary is required and click on the blue arrow( ) to execute the query The details of the candidates at particular statusrsquo willupdate to show the summary for the vacancy chosen

7 Summary of Active CandidatesThe summary of active candidates when first opened will display candidates for allvacancies that the user has access to broken down by the statusrsquo of the candidate Oncea particular vacancy has been chosen (point 6 above) this will update to show thecandidates per status for the selected vacancy

8 System MenuThis menu provides access to various functionality within the system including

Candidates Vacancies Interviews References Statistics

A breakdown as to the functionality and sub menus within these categories is explainedthroughout the manual

9 Applications GraphThis provide a visual breakdown (Figure 11) of the volume of applications received Whenfirst visible this will show all candidates for the vacancies that the user has access toOnce a particular vacancy has been selected (point 6 above) this will change to show thenumber of applications for a particular vacancy

10 Summary of Interviews PendingThis will show a summary of the interviews that the user has been given access to Thecalendar can be broken down as intervals between 1 week and 1 year by clicking on thedrop down list in the top left hand corner and clicking on lsquogorsquo

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 3: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 3 of 32 11 January 2010

Navigation

Requesting Access to the System

In order to access the ROME system a user registration form must be completed signedoff by the requestorrsquos Head of Departments or nominee and returned to the HRInformation Office The form can be accessed from wwwuclacukhrrome

There are various levels of access to the ROME system as follows

Recruiter Chair Interviewer

Log On Screen

1 Access to the system is via single sign on Start your Internet browser and enter thefollowing URL httpsstaticwcncoukcompanyuclsingle_sign_onhtml

Figure 10 System log in

2 Enter your username and password (both are case sensitive)

If you enter your username and password combination incorrectly three times insuccession you will be locked out of your account for security reasons

Please contact the HR Helpdesk on 020 7679 9775 (extension 09775) or you can raise acall by logging your query on HR Systems Helpdesk Webform which will authenticate youusing your UCL username and password and allow you to enter the details of the issueusing pre-defined categories and free text

Navigating the HomepageThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features Thesesecurity features also prevent system users from using the Internet browser tool bar at thetop of the page If users try and use the refresh back and forward buttons they may belogged out of the system and have to log back in with potential loss of data Users aretherefore instructed to use the various menus tool bars and icons contained within thesystem to navigate through the system only

There are features on the home page of the system that assist with navigation These aredetailed below

2 3 45 6

7

8

1

Helen Brown Page 4 of 32

Figure 11 System homepage

1 The Home ButtonThe home button can be clicked on at any point whilst usingautomatically be returned to the system home page

2 Recently Viewed CandidatesWhen this button is clicked a drop down of recently viewedscreen

3 Quick SearchThe Quick Search provides a way of searching the system fo

1

0

11 January 2010

the system and you will

candidates will populate the

r candidates by their name

9

Helen Brown Page 5 of 32 11 January 2010

4 Quick Status SearchWhen the box is clicked into a drop down list of the applicant statusrsquo will appear Selectthe status on which the search is to be conducted and the search will commence

5 Switch to Saved Search CriteriaThis allows previously saved searches to be chosen

6 Click and Type to Search VacanciesThis allows the lsquoSummary of Active Candidatesrsquo to be refinedClick in the box and a drop down list of the vacancies that the user has access to willappear Select the vacancy for which the summary is required and click on the blue arrow( ) to execute the query The details of the candidates at particular statusrsquo willupdate to show the summary for the vacancy chosen

7 Summary of Active CandidatesThe summary of active candidates when first opened will display candidates for allvacancies that the user has access to broken down by the statusrsquo of the candidate Oncea particular vacancy has been chosen (point 6 above) this will update to show thecandidates per status for the selected vacancy

8 System MenuThis menu provides access to various functionality within the system including

Candidates Vacancies Interviews References Statistics

A breakdown as to the functionality and sub menus within these categories is explainedthroughout the manual

9 Applications GraphThis provide a visual breakdown (Figure 11) of the volume of applications received Whenfirst visible this will show all candidates for the vacancies that the user has access toOnce a particular vacancy has been selected (point 6 above) this will change to show thenumber of applications for a particular vacancy

10 Summary of Interviews PendingThis will show a summary of the interviews that the user has been given access to Thecalendar can be broken down as intervals between 1 week and 1 year by clicking on thedrop down list in the top left hand corner and clicking on lsquogorsquo

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 4: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Navigating the HomepageThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features Thesesecurity features also prevent system users from using the Internet browser tool bar at thetop of the page If users try and use the refresh back and forward buttons they may belogged out of the system and have to log back in with potential loss of data Users aretherefore instructed to use the various menus tool bars and icons contained within thesystem to navigate through the system only

There are features on the home page of the system that assist with navigation These aredetailed below

2 3 45 6

7

8

1

Helen Brown Page 4 of 32

Figure 11 System homepage

1 The Home ButtonThe home button can be clicked on at any point whilst usingautomatically be returned to the system home page

2 Recently Viewed CandidatesWhen this button is clicked a drop down of recently viewedscreen

3 Quick SearchThe Quick Search provides a way of searching the system fo

1

0

11 January 2010

the system and you will

candidates will populate the

r candidates by their name

9

Helen Brown Page 5 of 32 11 January 2010

4 Quick Status SearchWhen the box is clicked into a drop down list of the applicant statusrsquo will appear Selectthe status on which the search is to be conducted and the search will commence

5 Switch to Saved Search CriteriaThis allows previously saved searches to be chosen

6 Click and Type to Search VacanciesThis allows the lsquoSummary of Active Candidatesrsquo to be refinedClick in the box and a drop down list of the vacancies that the user has access to willappear Select the vacancy for which the summary is required and click on the blue arrow( ) to execute the query The details of the candidates at particular statusrsquo willupdate to show the summary for the vacancy chosen

7 Summary of Active CandidatesThe summary of active candidates when first opened will display candidates for allvacancies that the user has access to broken down by the statusrsquo of the candidate Oncea particular vacancy has been chosen (point 6 above) this will update to show thecandidates per status for the selected vacancy

8 System MenuThis menu provides access to various functionality within the system including

Candidates Vacancies Interviews References Statistics

A breakdown as to the functionality and sub menus within these categories is explainedthroughout the manual

9 Applications GraphThis provide a visual breakdown (Figure 11) of the volume of applications received Whenfirst visible this will show all candidates for the vacancies that the user has access toOnce a particular vacancy has been selected (point 6 above) this will change to show thenumber of applications for a particular vacancy

10 Summary of Interviews PendingThis will show a summary of the interviews that the user has been given access to Thecalendar can be broken down as intervals between 1 week and 1 year by clicking on thedrop down list in the top left hand corner and clicking on lsquogorsquo

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 5: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 5 of 32 11 January 2010

4 Quick Status SearchWhen the box is clicked into a drop down list of the applicant statusrsquo will appear Selectthe status on which the search is to be conducted and the search will commence

5 Switch to Saved Search CriteriaThis allows previously saved searches to be chosen

6 Click and Type to Search VacanciesThis allows the lsquoSummary of Active Candidatesrsquo to be refinedClick in the box and a drop down list of the vacancies that the user has access to willappear Select the vacancy for which the summary is required and click on the blue arrow( ) to execute the query The details of the candidates at particular statusrsquo willupdate to show the summary for the vacancy chosen

7 Summary of Active CandidatesThe summary of active candidates when first opened will display candidates for allvacancies that the user has access to broken down by the statusrsquo of the candidate Oncea particular vacancy has been chosen (point 6 above) this will update to show thecandidates per status for the selected vacancy

8 System MenuThis menu provides access to various functionality within the system including

Candidates Vacancies Interviews References Statistics

A breakdown as to the functionality and sub menus within these categories is explainedthroughout the manual

9 Applications GraphThis provide a visual breakdown (Figure 11) of the volume of applications received Whenfirst visible this will show all candidates for the vacancies that the user has access toOnce a particular vacancy has been selected (point 6 above) this will change to show thenumber of applications for a particular vacancy

10 Summary of Interviews PendingThis will show a summary of the interviews that the user has been given access to Thecalendar can be broken down as intervals between 1 week and 1 year by clicking on thedrop down list in the top left hand corner and clicking on lsquogorsquo

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 6: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 6 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating a VacancyTo create a vacancy the user selects ldquoNew Vacancyrdquo from the Vacancies menu that isalways visible to users logged on to the ROME system The user is taken to the screendepicted in Figure 20

Users can create a new vacancy by clicking one of the 3 template options at the top of thepage or they can choose to copy an existing vacancy by scrolling through the list ofexisting vacancies and clicking lsquoCopy an Existing Vacancyrsquo-

Figure 20 Template Options

Once the template has been chosen the user will be taken to the page where the vacancyinformation is inserted

lsquoCopy an Existing VacancyrsquoIf this option is chosen bear in mind to rename the new vacancy and amend the detailsaccordingly

lsquoNew TemplatersquoOn choosing one of the 3 new templates you will need to create the vacancy bycompleting all the details in Steps 1 to 8 listed below

The information attached to a vacancy template is split into 4 stages-

Vacancy Details (Steps 1 to 5)

Search Criteria (Step 6)

Pre-Sceens (Step 6b)

Application Form (Step 7)

Access (Step 8)

Steps 1 to 5 Vacancy Details

Step 1 The purpose of the ownership is for reporting Dependant on where the job isplaced this will impact upon the reports that can be produced Where the ownership istagged at a lower level this can be walked back up to faculty etc ie if ownership is at ahigher level it is not possible to break the reports down

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 7: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 7 of 32 11 January 2010

Step 2 This is the vacancy title and it will appear in the advert together with a uniquereference number generated by the system Please avoid quoting additional departmentalreference numbers

Steps 3 amp 4 Entries here involve free text box input selection of a radio button or from adrop down list Where the radio button is marked against lsquoPlease specifyrsquo you will need tochoose one of the appropriate radio buttons found immediately to the right Symbolsagainst the various fields are defined in Table 1

Symbol Description Fields in blue labelled with this symbol are mandatory

This symbol identifies that the data in this particular field will be visible to thecandidatesHelp button A text box appears with information appropriate to that fieldPaste button available to paste text directly into a field Alternatively selectlsquoCtrl+Vrsquo to paste text into the field

Table 1 Purpose of the symbols in the vacancy template

A sample of steps 3 and 4 is given in Figure 21

Figure 21 Part of steps 3 and 4

Step 5 Selecting lsquoConfirmrsquo takes the user to Step 6

Steps 6 and 6b Search Criteria and Pre-Screens

After completing the vacancy details the user can then tag the vacancy to lsquoSalaryRange(s)rsquo and lsquoJob Type(s)rsquo This feeds through to the search criteria of the UCL jobspage to help candidates filter available vacancies

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 8: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 8 of 32 11 January 2010

If you wish to apply pre-screen questions to this vacancy there are two options available

ExperiencequalificationsThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the experience and qualificationsset out in the job description person specification

Essential criteria for the roleThis will ask the applicant if they feel they meet the essential criteria set out in thejob description person specification

Step 7 Application Form

This step allows for an application form to be tagged to the vacancy Three choicesavailable to the user are

UCL Application Form Applications by CV Clinical Application Form

Exception to the above is that for the PhD Studentship template no application form is tobe selected here This option is provided to the user ie lsquoDo not tag to application formrsquosee Figure 22

Figure 22 Step 7 options

Step 8 Access

This section identifies which users have access to the vacancy see Figure 23 Thesystem allows for multiple users to be tagged to the Administrator(s)Interviewer roles

Whilst the user can be set to a particular access for the vacancy please note that thelevel of access to the ROME system for a particular user is determined by their userprofile (initially set up by the HR Information Office against a user account)

Figure 23 User access to a vacancy

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 9: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 9 of 32 11 January 2010

Minimum Information Required to Create a Vacancy

When completing the vacancy template to save the vacancy and return to this at a laterdate ensure that lsquoConfirmrsquo has been clicked on each of the 4 tabs in the lsquocreate avacancyrsquo process The minimum information that needs to be completed are ownershipjob title lsquogo liversquo date and closing date and attaching an application form Once thisinformation has been completed and confirmed and the vacancy has been assigned areference number this can be exited and returned to at a later date

1 Ownership2 Job Title3 Go live date4 Closing date5 Tag the relevant application form

1 2

34

Figure 24 The 5 fields that must be completed as a minimum to create a vacancy

5

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 10: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 10 of 32 11 January 2010

Editing a Vacancy - Amendments

The vacancy toolbar see Figure 25 allows the user to access the vacancy in variousways to amend and view the advert as required

Figure 25 Vacancy Toolbar

Note The following editing functions can only be selected if the vacancy has not beenactivated or if the vacancy has been deactivated by the Human Resources AdministrativeProcess Team

Edit - Edit Vacancy DescriptionAllows the user to edit the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo (Steps 1 to 5)

Tagging ndash Salary Range Job TypePre-SceenAllows the user to edit the lsquoSearch Criteriarsquo (Stepd 6 and 6b)

Edit - RolesThis allows the user to grantchange access to the vacancy (Step 8)

Editing a Vacancy - Incomplete Vacancy Data submission

Figure 26 shows the vacancy summary screen for which the vacancy data entry isincomplete This is indicated by the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description reading as lsquoVacancyInformation Incompletersquo and the lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancy Summaryrsquo sectionof the screen is not ticked

To identify the incomplete sections select lsquoActivate Vacancyrsquo from the lsquoEditrsquo option of thetoolbar Figure 26 The subsequent screen identifies the incomplete fields It is advisableto take a ldquoprint screenrdquo of this page Access the vacancy by selecting lsquoEdit VacancyDetailsrsquo

Figure 26 Vacancy summary screen (incomplete fields)

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 11: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 11 of 32 11 January 2010

Requesting a Vacancy Placement to Human Resources

For a successfully completed vacancy data entry the lsquoVacancy statusrsquo description readingas lsquoAwaiting ApprovalActivationrsquo and a ticked lsquoVacancy Detailsrsquo box in the lsquoVacancySummaryrsquo section of the screen see Figure 27

Figure 27 Vacancy summary screen

The user needs to notify the Human Resources Administrative Process Team (HRAPT) ofan advert submission in order for HRAPT to approve and publish the vacancy This isdone by selecting lsquoEmail Vacancy Detailsrsquo on the lsquoCurrent Vacancy Actionsrsquo screen of thevacancy summary page see Figure 27 The user is required to email notification of theadvert request to HR as follows (see Figure 28)

Type hr_advertsuclacuk in the Recipients field

Figure 28 Email template for notifying Human Resources of the advert request

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 12: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 12 of 32 11 January 2010

Vacancy Workflow

Jobsacuk Opportunities

Advertising Agency(Adsfab)

Human Resources(ROME)

Department SpecialistWebsites and

Forums

Department Create Advert Advert Received

[Externalpublication]

Proof producedProof Received

[Proof not approved]

[Proof approved]

Proof Authorised

Copy of advert received

[Approved(activated)]

[]

UCL Website

Authorisation Received

Advert Placed

Advert Placed

[ROME email sent]

Approval Received

Advert Placed

[Advert queriedwith department]

[Email link tohr_advertsuclacuk]

[NotApproved]

[Adsfabinformed]

Advert Received

[Advert queried -vacancy template to be updated)]

[OK to proceed(Activeapprove)]

[Posted to externalsearch engine]

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 13: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 13 of 32 11 January 2010

Creating Interviews

To access setting up interviews on the system-

Click on the lsquoInterviewsrsquo option in the left hand menu and select the optionlsquoInterviewsrsquo (Figure 30)

Figure 30 Home page ndash Interview options

To create interviews go to lsquointerview typesrsquo on the top menu and select lsquonewrsquo(Figure 31)

Figure 31 Creating new interview slots

Once lsquonewrsquo has been selected create a new interview template by completing eachpage from lsquoGeneralrsquo to lsquoAdvanced Optionsrsquo and click on lsquoNextrsquo at the bottom ofeach page to save the information and move on to the next page step in theprocess

Once all pages have been completed click lsquoCreatersquo at the bottom of the lsquoAdvancedOptionsrsquo page to create the interview template An interview summary page of theinformation entered will be created (Figure 32)

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 14: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 14 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 32 Creating interviews ndash Interview Summary

Creating the Interview Slots

Once the interview template has been created you can create the interview slots

To create interview slots from the interview summary screen click on lsquoEditrsquo withinthe Interview slots section (Figure 33)

Figure 33 Creating interviews ndash Interview Slots

Complete the fields to create new interview slots taking in to account any breaksbetween interviews or lunch breaks Once completed click on lsquoEnterrsquo to create theinterview slots (Figure 34)

Figure 34 Creating interview slots Enter New Slots

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 15: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 15 of 32 11 January 2010

Note the ICal calendar notification defaults to yes This will automatically send emailsnotifications to the interviewer so that they are aware of the interview and will enter theinterview details into their outlook calendar

Edit Amend Interview Schedules

To edit amend interview schedules go to lsquoYour Schedulersquo select the interviews tobe amended and from the summary page either click on lsquoeditrsquo in the top right handcorner of section heading or click on lsquooptions forrsquo from the top menu and selectlsquocreateedit schedulersquo (Figure 35)

Figure 35 Edit Amend Interview Schedules

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 16: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 16 of 32 11 January 2010

Add Candidate

To enter the candidates information from the main menu click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo fromthe candidate area (Figure 40)

Figure 40 Candidates menu Add candidate

Prior to entering the candidate information an account needs to be created on behalf ofthe candidate Where the candidates email address is known enter the email addressonly and click on search

Where the email address is not known enter the candidates first name and last name andclick on search This will check for any duplicate candidates within the system (Figure 41)

Figure 41 Candidates menu Add candidate Create Candidate Account

Where matches are identified the details of the candidate who already exists with thematching email address will be displayed (Figure 42)

To add this existing candidate to a particular recruitment action click on lsquoPut forward foranother jobrsquo on the right hand side

Figure 42 Candidates menu Add candidate Search criteria match

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 17: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 17 of 32 11 January 2010

The applicant details will populate the lsquoAdd Candidatersquo field select the appropriatevacancy to which this candidate is to be added (Figure 43) and click on lsquoAdd Candidatersquo(Figure 44)

Figure 43 Candidates menu Add candidate Select Vacancy

Figure 44 Candidates menu Add candidate

Once the search has been completed where not matches are returned the lsquoAddApplicationrsquo screen (Figure 45) will open

Figure 45 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application

Complete all the fields on this screen Those marked with a () are mandatory andwill need to be completed before the applicant details can be submitted

Ensure that the correct vacancy is chosen so that the candidate can be progressedthrough the recruitment campaign

The lsquoApplicant Statusrsquo should always be set to lsquoNew Applicantrsquo (Figure 46) and click onadd candidate

Figure 46 Candidates menu Add candidate Add Application Applicant Status

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 18: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 18 of 32 11 January 2010

Print Applications Print Book

To print applications received for the vacancy

From the home screen you can screen and progress multiple applications together

Select your vacancy and click on New Applicants (Figure 50)

Figure 50 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

From this screen you can print the application forms and attachments (Figure 51)

Figure 51 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

Ticked the candidates or select all and click on lsquoPrint Applicationsrsquo This option willonly produce the application forms

Click on lsquoPrint BookApp Summaryrsquo to produce the application forms and anydocuments the candidate has attached

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 19: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 19 of 32 11 January 2010

Shortlisting

To record shortlisting scoresfeedback by each individual interview panel member and thelsquochairrsquo select the candidate and click on the lsquohistoryrsquo icon (Figure 60)

Figure 60 Shortlisting ndash Viewing and Printing applications

ScoresFeedback

From the menu that appears click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo which progresses you through to theapplicant status screen and click on New Applicants(Figure 61)

Figure 61 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

You can arrange the candidates by first name surname id or applicant status by clickingthe relevant header Select the candidates and click the history icon (Figure 62)

Figure 62 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 20: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 20 of 32 11 January 2010

Clicking on lsquoScoresFeedbackrsquo will give the system user access to the various scoringforms such as Panel Agreed Sift Rating and Screening Criteria (Figure 63)

Figure 63 - Applicant Tracking ndash ScoresFeedback

Screening Criteria Update

This is used by each panel member to record the outcome of their individualshortlisting

To add a new scoring form onto a candidates record click lsquoUpdatersquo option fromthe drop down list and to vieweditamend an existing evaluation template once ithas been created click on the lsquoViewEditrsquo option

Click on Scorefeedback and select option from drop down list that appears whenclicking in box

Panel Agreed sift rating Update

This is to be used by the Chair of the interview panel to record the outcome of theoverall shortlisting process

Moving Applicant Statuses

From the Applicant Tracking screen you can move candidates into different statuses(Figure 70)

Select the candidate(s) you wish to move into a different status

Click on Progress to next stage click lsquoupdate statusrsquo

Figure 70 - Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 21: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 21 of 32 11 January 2010

From the drop down menu select the relevant status and click on update status

Figure 71 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

Select the appropriate correspondence to be generated to the candidate and clickon lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo

Figure 72 Shortlisting ndash Moving applicant statuses

The candidate status will update and the system will return to the lsquoapplicanttrackingrsquo screen

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 22: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 22 of 32 11 January 2010

Status Workflow

The recruitment process is based on a workflow that has been created within the system(Figure 80) The status workflow defines particular stages within the process that anapplicants whether they are progressing or being rejected needs to be moved through

Every new applicant when they have applied online or manually created willautomatically be assigned lsquoNew Applicantrsquo status

From this point on each candidate will be moved to the appropriate status dependent ontheir progress

A candidate can be moved directly from lsquo1st Interview scheduledrsquo to lsquoContactingsuccessful applicantrsquo as not every recruitment process will have more than one round ofinterviews

A candidate should continue to move forwards through the system and not backwards atany point

There are 3 statusrsquo that are available at any point in the process These are

Withdrawn by candidate Withdrawn by recruiter On hold

This enables these 3 statusrsquo to be assigned to an individual at any stage of the process

Attached to each of the defined status is template correspondence appropriate for thatstatus

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 23: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 23 of 32 11 January 2010

Figure 80 Status Workflow

New ApplicantApplication pack

sent

1st Interview(scheduled)

2nd Interview(invite)

1st Interview(reject)

Rejected AfterShortlisting

2nd Interview(scheduled)

3rd Interview(invite)

2nd Interview(reject)

3rd Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(invite)

3rd Interview(reject)

Final Interview(scheduled)

Final Interview(reject)

Offer Rescinded

Available from any status

Withdrawn byCandidate

Withdrawn byRecruiter

Conditional OfferRejected

ConditionalOffer Accepted

ConditionalOffer Rejected

References ampEmployment

Checks

StaffRegistration

(Onboarding)

1st Interview(invite)

HR Informed ofNew Starter

ConditionalOffer Made

ContactingSuccessfulApplicant

On hold

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 24: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 24 of 32 11 January 2010

Inviting Candidates to Attend the Interviews

Once the interview slots have been created a group of candidates can be invited to eitherbook interview slots (through self schedule) or be booked on to interviews (departmentalschedule)

From the home page select the vacancy for which you want to invite candidates tointerview (Figure 90)

Figure 90 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates

Click on lsquoNew Applicantrsquo to bring up all candidates in that status This will allow allcandidate to be moved on to the appropriate status (eg 1st Interview inviteRejected after shortlisting etc)

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( ) (Figure 91)

Click on to lsquoProgress to next stagersquo at the bottom of the page

Figure 91 Booking Interviews Selecting candidates for interview

Click on lsquoApplicant Status Change to lsquo1st Interview Invitersquo and click on updatestatus (Figure 92)

Figure 92 Booking Interviews Moving candidate to the lsquo1st

Interview (invite)rsquo status

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 25: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 25 of 32 11 January 2010

You will be prompted to select the correspondence to be sent (Figure 93)Once selected edit this as required and click on lsquoUpdate Statusrsquo Once thestatusrsquo have been updated you will be returned to the list of candidates

Figure 93 Booking Interviews Selecting the

appropriate correspondence

Select the candidates to be invited to interview by ticking the box on the right hand

side and click on the history icon ( )

Select lsquoSchedule for 1st Interviewrsquo and select the time for the interview (Figure 94)

Figure 94 Schedule for 1st

Interview

Select the appropriate correspondence to send out (Figure 95)

Figure 95 Schedule for 1st

Interview correspondence

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 26: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 26 of 32 11 January 2010

Viewing Interview Schedules

To view interview schedules from the home page go to the interviews section andleft hand side of the menu and select lsquoYour Schedulersquo (Figure 96)

When you click on the number booked this will bring up a list of candidates who arebooked to attend an interview

Figure 96 View Interview Schedules

Printing off Interview SchedulesHighlight the expanded box of candidates the date and time of the interviews copy thisand paste in to Microsoft Word to create an interview schedule

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 27: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 27 of 32 11 January 2010

References (and Sub Statuses)

From the lsquoApplicant trackingrsquo page select the candidate that you want to start thereferencing process for and click on the history button (Figure 100)

Figure 100 Candidate Tracking Requesting References

Click on references on the top menu and select lsquoReference Change to Referencerequired (Figure 101) This will update the reference sub status

Figure 101 Candidate Tracking Updating Reference Status

Highlight the candidate for whom references are to be generated and click onlsquoInitiate 1st interviewrsquo (Figure 102) Where there is more then 1 reference repeatthis for the appropriate reference types

Figure 102 Candidate Tracking Initiate 1st

Reference

At the reference status page (Figure 103) select the candidate for whomreferences are to be taken up tick the appropriate reference to be generated andclick on lsquoSend Correspondence Nowrsquo Only generate one reference at a time

Figure 103 Candidate Tracking Generating the reference

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 28: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 28 of 32 11 January 2010

Generate the reference letter

Do not update the candidate status

Click on lsquoUpdate Letter Log and Candidate Statusrsquo

Sub StatusesThe remaining sub statuses has similar functionality to the Reference requests

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 29: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 29 of 32

Statistics Reports

Reports NavigationTo generate statistics from the ROME system the user needs to select the statistics optionlocated on the menu bar at the left hand side of the screen circled in the figure below Thisfigure shows the screen as a result of the user selecting the option lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo ndashdefined below (Figure 110)

Figure 110 Applicant Statistics selection

1 Report on Candidate Statuses2 Filtering Options toolbar3 CreateSaveExportPrint Options toolbar4 Toolbar showing options which hold pre-save

Statistics Menu Bar Options

Applicant StatisticsTakes the user to the lsquoStatistics homepage dstandard predefined report of the current Ca

Applicant Statistics (default)Takes the user to a pre-saved report that ha

Applicant statistics (last)Takes the user to the last viewed report

Download Candidate DataAllows the user to create a MS Excel spread

Application NumbersThis option displays numbers of candidate a

2 3

4

ndash ldquoStatistic

d reports

epicted (ndidate S

s been de

sheet of

nd applic

1

s

Ft

c

a

11 January 2010

Homepagerdquo

igure 110) This is aatuses

signated the default report

andidate data

tions made by date

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 30: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 30 of 32 11 January 2010

Accessing a Presaved Report

A pre-saved report can be accessed by selecting ldquoEqual Opportunitiesrdquo (Figure110) circled below

There are various reports given under this option

Figure 110 Examples of pre-saved reports accessible to the user

Creating a New Report

At the lsquoApplicant Statisticsrsquo page select the icon (not shown) to start the process ofcreating a new report The user is taken to the data type options for the new report (Figure112)

Figure 111 Data type selection for a new report

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 31: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 31 of 32 11 January 2010

An example of a new report is shown below (Figure 112) This report shows the lsquoAgeRangersquo for all candidates displaying only the data for categories contributing to 10 orgreater than 10 of the total

Figure 112 New Report ndash Age Ranges (=gt10 of the total)

The system allows the user to export a report as an MS Excel spreadsheet by selecting

the icon and the report can be printed by selecting the icon (not shown) To save a

report the user needs to click the icon (not shown) and follow the instructions givenHowever it is important that the user only saves the report under the option lsquoMy Statsrsquo

Editing a ReportThe user can edit a report either by selecting one of the options in the toolbar (circled in

Figure 113) or by accessing the icon to bring up the options (Figure 113) as well

Figure 5 Options available to the Report presentation

Figure 113 Editing a Report

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010

Page 32: Online Recruitment System Quick Guide to the System Recruiter Quick Reference_crib sheets_v1.07.pdfThe online recruitment system opens up in a new window for security features. These

Helen Brown Page 32 of 32 11 January 2010

Version History

Version Description Name Release Date100 Released HR Process 22042009101 Released HR Process 28042009103 Released HR Process 11052009104 Released HR Process 22052009105 Released HR Process 11062009106 Released HR Process 22072009107 Released HR Process (LD) 15012010